Casio | EX-H60 | User manual | Casio EX-H60 EX-ZS220 دليل الاستخدام

Casio EX-H60 EX-ZS220 دليل الاستخدام
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪http://www.exilim.com/‬‬
‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-80‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)‪(AD-C53U/AD-C54UG‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .USB AD-C53U‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ!‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻜﺒﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ .٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻀﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺰﻯ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪2..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ!‪3.............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪8......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪9...................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪12 .........................................‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪13 ................................................................. .‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪13 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪14 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪19 ......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪20 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪21 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪22 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪23 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪24 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪25 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪25 .................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪26 ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪28 ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪29 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪31 ................................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪32 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪33 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) ........................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪34 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪) ............................................................................‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪36 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪) ...............................................................‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪39 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ‪40 .....(Make-up) ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) ....................................................................‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‪41 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪) ..................................................‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‪41 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ‪42 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪44 .....(ART SHOT) ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪) ..................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ(‪45 .....‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫❚❙‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪47 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫‪49 ............................................................. BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪).............................................................‬ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪51 .....‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪52 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪) ..................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪54 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪) ..................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪54 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪) ....................................................‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪56 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) ..................................................‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪57 ......(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) ............................‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪58 ......(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪) ............................................................‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‪58 ......‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪) ..............................................................‬ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪59 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ‪) ...........................................‬ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‪60 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪)......................................... [6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪61 ......‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪)........................................................‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ(‪61 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪)...................................................................‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‪62 ......‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪) ............................................................‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ(‪62 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪) .........................................................‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‪63 ......‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫❚‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪)....................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪64 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ T) ...................................................‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ((‪64 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) ................................................................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪64 ......(EV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪) .......................................................‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪65 ......‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪67 ......(ISO) ...........................................................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ‪)................................................‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪67 ......‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪68 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪68 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪69 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪69 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪70 ..................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪72 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ..............................................‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪73 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪) ...................................................‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‪74 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪)......................................................‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ(‪74 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪).................................................................................‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪75 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪) .............................................................‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪75 .....(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪) .....................................................................‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪76 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪) ....................................................................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪77 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪) .............................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‪77 .....‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪) ..................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺪﺑﻠﺠﺔ(‪78 .....‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪) .................................................................................‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ(‪79 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫❚❙‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪Dynamic Photo‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪80 .... (Dynamic Photo) .................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ...............................................Dynamic Photo‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫❚❙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪81 ......(Dynamic Photo‬‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪82 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪82 .......................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪85 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪86 ..................................................... Windows‬‬
‫❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪86 ...................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪89 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪90 .................................................................... Macintosh‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪91 ................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪92 ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫❚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪93 ..........................................‬‬
‫‪93 ..... (Eye-Fi)...................................................... Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪95 .....(FlashAir).................FlashAir‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪97 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪98 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪100‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪100 ...(Eye-Fi) .................................................. Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪100 ...(FlashAir) ........................................... FlashAir‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ...........................................................‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪101 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) ............................................................‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪101 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪) .........................................‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪102 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪) ....................................................‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‪103 ...‬‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪) ..............................................................‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪104 ...‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪).........................................................................‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‪104 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪) ....................................................................‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪105 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪105 ...(Language) ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪)...............................................................‬ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‪105 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) .............................................‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪106 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪106 ...(REC) ....................................................................... [r‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Ü) ..................................................................‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ(‪107 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) ......................................‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪107 ...‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) ....................................................‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪108 ...‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪) ..........................‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪108 ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪109‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ‪109 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪116 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪119 .............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪119 .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪119 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪120 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪120 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪121 ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪123 ................................................................. ...‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪123 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪128 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪130 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪132 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪bl bm bn bo 8‬‬
‫‪1 2 345678‬‬
‫] [‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫] [‬
‫] [‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫] [‬
‫‪bt bs br bq bp‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 26‬ﻭ‪ 42‬ﻭ‪ 69‬ﻭ‪ bk (69‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 48‬ﻭ‪(78‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(32‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(25‬‬
‫‪ bl‬ﺯﺭ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 23‬ﻭ‪(25‬‬
‫‪) [ON/OFF] 4‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(23‬‬
‫‪ bm‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ bn‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 15‬ﻭ‪ 17‬ﻭ‪(37‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬
‫‪ bo‬ﺯﺭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(2‬‬
‫‪ bp‬ﺯﺭ ]‪) [SET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(33‬‬
‫)ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫‪ bq‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(29‬‬
‫‪ br‬ﺯﺭ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 23‬ﻭ‪(28‬‬
‫‪ bs‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫]‬
‫[‬
‫)]‪([8] [2] [4] [6‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 11‬ﻭ‪ 29‬ﻭ‪ 33‬ﻭ‪36‬‬
‫ﻭ‪(52‬‬
‫‪ bt‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 9‬ﻭ‪(11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ck cl‬‬
‫‪ ck‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ]‪) [USB/AV‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 14‬ﻭ‪ 16‬ﻭ‪(70‬‬
‫‪ cl‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫‪ cm‬ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 13‬ﻭ‪(21‬‬
‫‪ cn‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ co‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪co cn cm‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪bm‬‬
‫‪bn‬‬
‫‪bo‬‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪1 2 34 5 6 7 8‬‬
‫‪bq‬‬
‫‪ck bt bsbr‬‬
‫‪cp‬‬
‫‪co‬‬
‫‪cn‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫‪cl‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(130‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(25‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(65‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(59‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(132‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(34‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬
‫‪ bk‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫‪ bl‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫‪ bm‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬
‫‪) Make-up bn‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬
‫‪ bo‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫‪ bp‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫‪ bq‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(104‬‬
‫‪ br‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(67‬‬
‫‪ bs‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬
‫‪ bt‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 26‬ﻭ‪(57‬‬
‫‪ ck‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(104‬‬
‫‪ cl‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(18‬‬
‫‪) Eye-Fi/FlashAir cm‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 93‬ﻭ‪(95‬‬
‫‪ cn‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(58‬‬
‫‪ co‬ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬
‫‪ cp‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(54‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(25‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(67‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 26‬ﻭ‪(57‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (AE‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(65‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(18‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪12 3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(76‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(97‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(34‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(67‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(104‬‬
‫‪ bk‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(18‬‬
‫‪) Eye-Fi bl‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(93‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪123 4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(68‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(76‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(97‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(104‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(18‬‬
‫‪) Eye-Fi 9‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(93‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪.(DISP) [8‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(105‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 25‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Make-up‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Make-up‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 40‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ART SHOT‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ”‪ “ART SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 44‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺈﺯﻋﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 41‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﺠﺮﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 49‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ًﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ )‪ (NP-80‬ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺪﺍﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪CASIO‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺪﺍﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ١٢٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫]‪[USB/AV‬‬
‫)‪(AD-C54UG‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫)‪(AD-C53U‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB/AV‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(119‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫)‪ .(2 ،1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ١٤٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫]‪[USB/AV‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ .USB‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬
‫)ﺿﻮء‪/‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(119‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫)ﺿﻮء ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (NP-80‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ )‪ (BC-80L‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﻤﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺫ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(104‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 134‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(60‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(36‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻔﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 105‬ﻭ‪.(106‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪) “(Language‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(105‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٥ ،‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫‪15/7/10‬‬
‫‪10/7/15‬‬
‫‪7/10/15‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫]‪[8‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪105‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪104‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺒﻜﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.130‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪SD‬‬
‫‪SDHC‬‬
‫‪SDXC‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻮ ‪.٢٠١٣‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDXC‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﺤﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪.FlashAir‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ )ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (20‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،SD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻄﺊ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.FlashAir‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”‪ “MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [SET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 28‬ﻭ‪.(68‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﺗﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 105‬ﻭ‪(106‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[ON/OFF‬‬
‫]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑـ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(106‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺬﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺑﻄﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺼﻤﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﺭﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ( ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ )ﻭﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ(‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [t‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(130‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎً ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪47‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(60‬ﺳﺘﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪...‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪...‬‬
‫”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (55‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (57‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ“‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ‪) Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (25‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Make-up‬‬
‫– ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻮﺿﺎء ً‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.68‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(10‬‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) z‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(69‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[6‬‬
‫]‪[6‬‬
‫]‪[4‬‬
‫]‪[4‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫[ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (78‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪ Ü‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ“ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(107‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪ Ü‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.“.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻄﻊ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻂء ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(64‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺫﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻬﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫– ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ‬
‫– ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫– ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (55‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(54‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(25‬‬
‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(25‬‬
‫‪BEST SHOT b‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﺸﻬﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(49‬‬
‫‪ART SHOT B‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫‪ £‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(45‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪) BEST SHOT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(49‬‬
‫‪) ART SHOT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(44‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺠﻢ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 34‬ﻭ‪(64‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬
‫‪) Make-up 5‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻷﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (9‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ُﻣﻌﺪًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫– ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫– ‪ :Make-up‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫– ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫– ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ”ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ“‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻀﺤﺖ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ (L‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪x‬ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬
‫‪10M‬‬
‫‪ ١٠) ٢٧٣٦x٣٦٤٨‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫‪١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫)‪ ٣‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.130‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.36‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.77‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪16M‬‬
‫)‪(٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫‪٢:٣‬‬
‫)‪(٣٠٧٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫‪٩:١٦‬‬
‫)‪(٢٥٩٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫‪HDTV‬‬
‫‪10M‬‬
‫)‪(٢٧٣٦x٣٦٤٨‬‬
‫‪5M‬‬
‫)‪(١٩٢٠x٢٥٦٠‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬
‫‪VGA‬‬
‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (77‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫‪A3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫‪A4‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫"‪3.5"x5‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺩﻱء ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ”‪.“16M‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “٢:٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،٢:٣‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ”‪ “HDTV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ“‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ HDTV‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪،٩:١٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ ٣:٤‬ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪.HDTV‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻛﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺩﻗﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍء ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[SET‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫‪HD‬‬
‫‪٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪STD‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٦‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “HD‬ﻛﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ( ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(131‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ( ) [2‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .( ) [2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪(DISP) [8‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫> ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫]‪( ) [2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫? ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺎً ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ¥‬ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.133‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (133‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺰﺣﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ Ñ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ Ì‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ï‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫‪) X3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Î‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،Make-up ،‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ART SHOT ،BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”‪) “Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ :Make-up‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ُ Make-up‬ﻣ ﱠ‬
‫ﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ±‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫½ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ُ Make-up‬ﻣﻌﻄﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(58‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ ،ART SHOT ،BEST SHOT‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺮﻱ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ï‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Ì‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺤﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) m‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫– ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬
‫– ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪) AF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(58‬‬
‫– ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(101‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(74‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ‪) 24X‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ 24X‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .382.6X‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪) w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ( ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) z‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ( ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(104‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫• ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ(‪ ,‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) z‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬
‫‪ 96.0X‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪382.6X‬‬
‫‪ 24X‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬
‫‪172.8X‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ‪24X‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ )ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪1X‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(34‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫”‪ “10M‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫‪16M‬‬
‫‪3:2‬‬
‫‪96.0X‬‬
‫‪24.0X‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪10M‬‬
‫‪121.2X‬‬
‫‪30.2X‬‬
‫‪5M‬‬
‫‪172.8X‬‬
‫‪43.2X‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫‪215.5X‬‬
‫‪54.0X‬‬
‫‪VGA‬‬
‫‪382.6X‬‬
‫‪172.8X‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ )‪(ART SHOT‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺎ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻏﺎﻣﺾ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﻓﺖ ﺃﻧﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺎﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(ART SHOT) [B‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ )‪ (ART‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[SET‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‪ “ART SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪.“ART SHOT‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Make-up‬ﻭﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪) (AF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (57‬ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫‪.ART SHOT‬‬
‫– ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ“ ﻣﻌﻄﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ“ ﻣﺤﺪﺩًﺍ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.131‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [£‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ` ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ (DISP) [8‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫– ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪) WAVE/IMA-ADPCM :‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪(WAV‬‬
‫‪ Windows Media Player‬ﺃﻭ‪.QuickTime‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ` ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫]‪[6] [4‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[6‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]‪(DISP) [8‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫]‪[2] [8‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 29‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(36‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(131‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪،(49‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) BEST SHOT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(60‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎً ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫– ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻞ ﻭﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ » ﻭ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ“ ﻛﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.(BEST SHOT) [b‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ )‪ (BS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [SET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪.BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫]‪[b‬‬
‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪ(‬
‫• ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [t‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ”‪ “For YouTube‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT YouTube‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ .YouTube‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ YouTube‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(98‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺴﻤﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ”‪ “For eBay‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺰﺍﺩ“‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(98‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫– ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪.BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ .BEST SHOT‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺷﺨﺼﺎﻥ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺷﺨﺼﺎﻥ(“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (106‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (105‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 72‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”‪ “MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [SET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ T‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ً [4‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[4‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪[6‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ”ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ“ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.52‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫”‪ “MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫”‪ T‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (40‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(58‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Make-up‬ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Make-up‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ*‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫)ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫)ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﺎ(‬
‫´ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍً‬
‫‪ Á‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍً‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 9‬ﻣﺎ ﻻ‬
‫)ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ *‪٢‬‬
‫‪MF‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ( *‪٢‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ ﻭﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠ ًﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻭﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪” ART SHOT‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ“‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜ ّﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻇﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻃﻼﻋﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ *oo :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9‬‬
‫* ‪ oo‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (61‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ“ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(57‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪًﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (40‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫”ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (58‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ß‬‬
‫‪¹‬‬
‫™‬
‫¬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﻮ ‪.ß‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪μ‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪(AF‬‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﻗﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(55‬‬
‫‪ I‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺣﺚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫”‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”‪ I‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ“‬
‫”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ“‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “MF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(54‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ“ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻮﺿﺎء ً‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(58‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ”‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ“ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪(AF‬‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺎ ًء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ )ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ( ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺠﻮﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﻤﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫– ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬
‫– ﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫– ‪ART SHOT‬‬
‫– ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (57‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (25‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (40‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫– ‪Make-up‬‬
‫– ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫– ‪ART SHOT‬‬
‫– ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫– ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﻲء ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪DEMO‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ“‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪) [6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫]‪[4]/[6‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪) EV‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(64‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(65‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(67‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻲ*‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(39‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫* ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Make-up‬ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪.(CS‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ“ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﻭﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫”ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‪ ...‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ “...‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻄﻞ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ*‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫* ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )‪ T‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ((‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ T‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺟﻴﺪ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺃﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﻘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ( ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(130‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪(EV‬‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (EV‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ –2.0 EV :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+ 2.0 EV‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪1/3 EV :‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ : [8‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .EV‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ : [2‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .EV‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0.0‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪EV‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ”‪.(“0.0‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﻏﺎﺋﻤﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪) ¤‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫' )ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻤﻄﺮ ﻭﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫“ )ﻇﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫† )ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫– )ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫« )ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻳﺪﻭﻱ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﻸ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )”ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ“‪” ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ“ ﺍﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ISO 64‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ISO 100‬‬
‫‪ISO 200‬‬
‫‪ISO 400‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ISO 800‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ISO 1600‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪” ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪/‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨّﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) ART SHOT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (44‬ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 28‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫»‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[6] [4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫]‪[6] [4‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2] [8‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪(DISP) [8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.([) z‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ ([) z‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ w‬ﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ‪ ،8X‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8X‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫‪.(]) w‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ]‪ [2‬ﺃﻭ]‪ [4‬ﺃﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ )?( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ )‪ (EMC-7A‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫]‪[USB/AV‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪AV‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.15‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(107‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﺘﺺ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺟﺰ ًءﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ (DISP) [8‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ )‪.(EMC-7A‬‬
‫– ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB/AV‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ (DISP) [8‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[8] [2‬‬
‫‪ â‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(68‬‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(46‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(78‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (73‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ä‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪ à‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.52‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[SET‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(72‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ١٥ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٣٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٦٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ“‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ً [SET‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[SET‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(72‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ m‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (101‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.44‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫“‬
‫”‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻻ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪(DPOF‬‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 82‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ›‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ”ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(108‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ 10M :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 5M‬ﺃﻭ ‪.VGA‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٢:٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ٣:٤‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٢:٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.٣:٤‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﺪﺑﻠﺠﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺩﺑﻠﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺷﺌﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪) WAVE/IMA-ADPCM :‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪(WAV‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺑﻠﺠﺔ‬
‫] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ˆ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫]‪[6] [4‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[2] [8‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫]‪(DISP) [8‬‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ Windows Media Player‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.QuickTime‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫‪Dynamic Photo‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )”ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ“(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.Dynamic Photo‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ”ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ُﻣ ً‬
‫ﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫™‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪Dynamic Photo‬‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(Dynamic Photo‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪٣:٤‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Dynamic Photo‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪.Dynamic Photo‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Dynamic Photo‬ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ( ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ‪ Motion JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) Dynamic Photo‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪(Dynamic Photo‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ Dynamic Photo‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 68‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Dynamic Photo‬‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ*‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ*‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(82‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ DPOF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪.DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .٩٩‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .٩٩‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪ “00‬ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻉ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪!DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺒﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪.(82‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(104‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺧﺘﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫‪Exif Print‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Exif Print‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪Exif Print‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 86‬ﻭ‪.(91‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪) (Eye-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(93‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 89‬ﻭ‪.(92‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪” Windows‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ “Windows‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.86‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪” Macintosh‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪ “Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.90‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪،Windows 8‬‬
‫‪،Windows 7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪،Windows Vista‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫)‪Windows XP (SP3‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪،Windows 8‬‬
‫‪،Windows 7‬‬
‫‪،Windows Vista‬‬
‫)‪Windows XP (SP3‬‬
‫‪،Windows Media Player‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.16‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ .USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ“‪.‬‬
‫“‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ ﻳﻤﻴﻨﺎً ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪.“DCIM‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻲ“‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“ )‪ (Windows Vista ،Windows 7 ،Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫)‪ (Windows XP‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ ،“DCIM‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 7‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ“‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬
‫“‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ“‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻟﺼﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows XP‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ“ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ“‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪) “DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‬
‫)‪ (Windows Vista ،Windows 7 ،Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ“ )‪ .(Windows XP‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻣﻄﻔﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺥ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.98‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Windows Media Player‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Windows XP (SP3) ،Windows Vista ،Windows 7 ،Windows 8‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ”‪:“HD‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٢ Pentium 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ”‪:“STD‬‬
‫‪ ١٫٠ Pentium M‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٠ Pentium 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ Windows Media Player‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DirectX 9.0c‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ”‪.“STD‬‬
‫– ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ‪ Windows Media Player‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ )‪ ،(EMC-7A‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪OS X‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪OS X‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،iPhoto‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪OS X‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،QuickTime‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ .Mac OS X 10.0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ Mac OS 10.1‬ﻭ‪ 10.2‬ﻭ‪10.3‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ 10.4‬ﻭ‪ 10.5‬ﻭ‪ 10.6‬ﻭ‪ 10.7‬ﻭ‪) 10.8‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.16‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻴُﻀﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﻮء ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ( ﻛﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ .USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻣﻄﻔﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘ ًﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.98‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،QuickTime‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ .Macintosh‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS X 10.3.9 :‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ‪ QuickTime 7 :‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .Macintosh‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“STD‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ‪.QuickTime‬‬
‫– ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ )‪ ،(EMC-7A‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(Eye-Fi) Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi SD‬ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪93‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (100‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩًﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻈﻬﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (106‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(128‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪94‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(FlashAir) FlashAir‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.FlashAir‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪) “Start automatically at boot‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ،FlashAir‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”‪) “FlashAir‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (100‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) “Start with the control image‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫• ‪ FlashAir W-02‬ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪ “FlashAir‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (100‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :FlashAir‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪) Start with the control image :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪FlashAir‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (105‬ﻭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(106‬‬
‫– ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(128‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪.FlashAir‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪FlashAir‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(98‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .CIMG9999‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪CIMG0 02 6.JPG‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬
‫)‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ ٩٠٠‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪) BEST SHOT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (49‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺴﻤﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫”‪ “For eBay‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺰﺍﺩ“‪.‬‬
‫– ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ eBay‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”‪.“100_EBAY‬‬
‫– ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”‪.“100_AUCT‬‬
‫• ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫”‪ “For YouTube‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ّ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ .YouTube‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ YouTube‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ ”‪.“100YOUTB‬‬
‫‪100CASIO‬‬
‫‪.999CASIO‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪1 00 CASI O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.10‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)‪.Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪DCIM‬‬
‫‪DCIM‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫* ‪100CASIO‬‬
‫‪CIMG0001.JPG‬‬
‫‪CIMG0002.AVI‬‬
‫‪CIMG0003.WAV‬‬
‫‪CIMG0004.JPG‬‬
‫‪CIMG0004.WAV‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫* ‪101CASIO‬‬
‫* ‪102CASIO‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪MISC‬‬
‫‪AUTPRINT.MRK‬‬
‫”ﻣﺰﺍﺩ“‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ “For eBay” :‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫)ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ .“For YouTube‬ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪100_EBAY :eBay‬‬
‫• ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﺩ‪100_AUCT :‬‬
‫• ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪100YOUTB :YouTube‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪DCF‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ DCIM‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪DCIM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻤﻤﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺭﺕ ﻻﺣﻘﺎً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ُ .DCIM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪ .DCIM‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 98‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(72‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(Eye-Fi) Eye-Fi‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫‪Eye - Fi‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(93‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(FlashAir) FlashAir‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫‪FlashAir‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “Start with the control image‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪ “FlashAir‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(95‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪) “Start automatically at boot‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪،FlashAir‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ :5 - 1‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫= ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(70‬‬
‫= ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(70‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (108‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(97‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0001‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻃﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٦٢‬ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺻﻴﻔﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﻜﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(104‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪ ٢٠١٥ ،‬ﻡ‪ ١:٢٥ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪2015/7/10‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪2015/7/10 1:25pm‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(84‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺧﺘﻤﺎﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫]‪[2] [8‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫]‪[6] [4‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠١‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٢٠٤٩‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (103‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (103‬ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪ ٢٠١٥ ،‬ﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫‪15/7/10‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫‪10/7/15‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫‪7/10/15‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪.“Language‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ 30 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫– ﺃُﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ“‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‪ 5 ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ )ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺃُﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ”‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ“‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪(REC) [r‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪106‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )‪ Ü‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫‪ Ü‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‬
‫”‪ Ü‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ“‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ Ü‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (108‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ Ü‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ“( ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PAL‬ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٣:٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪.٩:١٦‬‬
‫‪NTSC‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪٣:٤‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )‪ ٣:٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (٩:١٦‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.PAL‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ (EMC-7A) AV‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪107‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫– ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫”‪ Ü‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ((107‬ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 121‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪108‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫!‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ )‪ (-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪) .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺬﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪109‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺧﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺈﺑﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪...‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻠﺤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺸﻮﻑ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺸﻄﻔﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﻤﺎء ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪110‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺎﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻄﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪111‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺯﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .USB‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻭﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﻤﻀﻎ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﻝ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﻭﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CASIO‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪112‬‬
‫!‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺴﻘﻮﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻷﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺤﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺄﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻨﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– )ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﺸﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪113‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺄﻱ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﻤﻀﻎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻔﻄﻪ ﺑﻤﺎء ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻬﻴﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎً ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫– ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ‬
‫– ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺂﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﻓﺄﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪114‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺮ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺸﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‪1‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻤﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﻤﻀﻤﻀﺔ ﻓﻤﻚ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﻜﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺷﻄﻒ ً‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻔﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺴﺦ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪115‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(128‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ٠ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٪٨٥‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ(‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫– ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫– ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ “ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ” ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪116‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺵ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺨﺎً‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻚ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻚ ﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (108‬ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪117‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳُﻤﻨﻊ ﻣﻨﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺎً ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺎً‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﺎً ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺨﺮﻕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ™ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ® ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪ Windows Media‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪Windows 8‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ DirectX‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻭ‪ QuickTime‬ﻭ‪ iPhoto‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ YouTube‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ YouTube‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Google Inc.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi, Inc.‬‬
‫• ‪ FlashAir‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.TOSHIBA CORPORATION‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ EXILIM‬ﻭ‪ Dynamic Photo‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ YouTube‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪.YouTube, LLC‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪118‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳُﻌﺰﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺰﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻼ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺍً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ )‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪119‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺼﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ )‪ (NP-80‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 20‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(108‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺑﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍً ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪ CD-R‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CD-RW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪SD‬‬
‫‪SDHC‬‬
‫‪120‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ » ﻭ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(108‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ß‬‬
‫‪ I‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬‬
‫‪ :ISO‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ :AF‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬
‫‪ T‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪EV‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪0.0‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪121‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫‪Eye - Fi‬‬
‫‪FlashAir‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/1‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/1‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/1‬‬
‫= ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪/...//// :‬‬
‫= ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪...//// :‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ Ü‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫–‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺑﻠﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪122‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(13‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(14‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ CASIO NP-80‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(106‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ“‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪(١‬‬
‫‪(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪(٣‬‬
‫‪(٤‬‬
‫‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(31‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(54‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪123‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(36‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (36‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(49‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(55‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ´ )ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Á‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ( ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(54‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ´ )ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Á‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(54‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ CCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ“‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺩﻱء‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (36‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪124‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(18‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺿﻮء ﻛﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫< )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (36‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪) +‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(64‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 25‬ﻭ‪.(32‬‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ < )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (36‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻟﺞ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(64‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪(HD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.٢٤٫٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(104‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(117‬‬
‫‪125‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻮء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(76‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪ Ü‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(107‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(104‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(105‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪(٢‬‬
‫‪(٣‬‬
‫‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺁﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ً‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ‪ .USB‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪126‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 19‬ﻭ‪.(105‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(108‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.CASIO‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ (DISP) [8‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪127‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ALERT‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(108‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) FlashAir‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(95‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎً ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .٩٩٩‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ؟‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(93‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗُﺠﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪128‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪SYSTEM ERROR‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ LOCK‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ SDHC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SDXC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(108‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪129‬‬
‫‪LOCK‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫‪16M‬‬
‫)‪(٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫‪3:2‬‬
‫)‪(٣٠٧٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫)‪(٢٥٩٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬
‫‪10M‬‬
‫)‪(٢٧٣٦x٣٦٤٨‬‬
‫‪5M‬‬
‫)‪(١٩٢٠x٢٥٦٠‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬
‫‪VGA‬‬
‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٥٧‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‪١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٢*SD‬‬
‫‪٢٧٩١‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٧١‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٤١٩١‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ٤٫٩٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٣١٦٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٢٨‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٤٧٤٠‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ٤٫١٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٣٧٩٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٧٥‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٥٦٥٤‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٣٨‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٤٦٠٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٢٧‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪٦٨٤٩‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ١٫٧٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪٩٠٤٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ١٫٢٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪١٢٧٤٤‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ١٫٢٥‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪١٢٤٣٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٨٢٠‬ﻙ ﺏ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪١٨٩٦٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٠‬ﻙ ﺏ‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫‪٥٣٦١٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻙ ﺏ‬
‫‪130‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪٦٤٧٨٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ /‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ( ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٢*SD‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪HD‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪STD‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٦‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ*‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ٢٢٦٫٣‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫‪ ٢٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬ﺝﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ٣٤‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧٩٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ*‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ١٧‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪WAV‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٥ IMA-ADPCM‬ﻙ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‪١‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٢*SD‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ*‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬ﺝﺏ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧٩٦‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٨٫٠‬ﻡ ﺏ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .(SanDisk Corporation‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .HD‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ Ultra‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‪ “For YouTube‬ﻫﻮ ‪ ٢٠٤٨‬ﻡ ﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪131‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Exif) JPEG‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.3‬؛ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪2.0‬؛ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ،Motion JPEG AVI‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪) IMA-ADPCM‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ(‪) WAV :‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ٢٨٫٠ :‬ﻡ ﺏ(‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪SD/SDHC/SDXC‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪،(٢٥٩٢x٤٦٠٨) 16:9 ،(٣٠٧٢x٤٦٠٨) 3:2 ،(٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨) 16M‬‬
‫‪،(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨) 3M ،(١٩٢٠x٢٥٦٠) 5M ،(٢٧٣٦x٣٦٤٨) 10M‬‬
‫‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠) VGA‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠) STD ،(٧٢٠x١٢٨٠) HD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦٫١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ٢٫٣/١ CCD :‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ ١٦٫٤٤ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫)‪ F3.0 (W‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ ٤٫٥ = f 6.9 (T‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٨‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ٢٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ‪ ،24X‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪ 96X) 4X‬ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 382.6X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ HD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣ ًﻌﺎ )ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(VGA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ؛ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻭﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 9‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪ ٢ :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﺎ(‬
‫)ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‪ ٢ :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 9‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ (BS‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪ –2.0 EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) +2.0 EV‬ﺑﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ‪(1/3 EV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ‪ CCD‬ﻭﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ٢/١ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ(‪ ٤ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪132‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪ F3.0 (W‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪) F8.7 (W‬ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ‪(ND‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ISO 1600 ،ISO 800 ،ISO 400 ،ISO 200 ،ISO 100 ،ISO 64‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ :ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ٠٫٤ :‬ﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٫٢‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ ٠٫٤ :‬ﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٫٧‬ﻡ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٦٠٨٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪) USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( ‪/‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(NTSC/PAL) AV‬‬
‫‪LCD‬‬
‫‪TFT‬‬
‫ﺑـ ‪ ٣٫٠‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪١ x (NP-80‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪133‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫‪ ١٤٥‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪(HD‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪(HD‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪) NP-80 :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ ٧٠٠ :‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪(SanDisk Corporation‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪CASIO‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٤٫٠ ،‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ ١٠٦٫٩‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪ ٦٨٫٦ x‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ ٣٩ x‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ*(‬
‫‪ ٢٣٨‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٢١‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫* ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪(SanDisk Corporation‬‬
‫‪134‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-80‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٧٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ٣١٫٤‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٣٩٫٥ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٥٫٩ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(AD-C54UG‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٩٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ٦٥٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ٦٤٫٦‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٥٦٫٩ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٢٤ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٤٥‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(AD-C53U‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١٠٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ٦٥٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ٥٣‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٢١ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٤٥ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٣٧‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬
‫‪Manufacturer:‬‬
‫‪CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬‬
‫‪6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan‬‬
‫‪Responsible within the European Union:‬‬
‫‪CASIO EUROPE GmbH‬‬
‫‪Casio-Platz 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪135‬‬
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
M29
MA1307-A
2013
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising